2012 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M - General Motors · PDF file2012 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M In Brief ... Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual - 2012 - CRC - 11/9/11 Black plate (2,1)

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual - 2012 - CRC - 11/9/11

2012 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Luggage/Load Locations . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-27

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-24Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-29Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-40

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27


2012 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andSONIC are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division whereverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20897861 B Second Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-19Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑3.

B. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

C. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

D. Turn and Lane-Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

E. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.

F. Horn on page 5‑2.

G. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

H. Display Screen.

I. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

J. Storage. See Instrument PanelStorage on page 4‑1.

K. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

L. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

M. Cruise Control on page 9‑33.

N. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

O. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

P. Ignition Switch. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑15.

Q. Central Locking System onpage 2‑7.

R. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

S. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑24(If Equipped) or ManualTransmission on page 9‑26(If Equipped).

T. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

U. Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Starting the EngineThe vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. It assists in starting theengine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned toSTART and then released when theengine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a fewseconds or until the engine starts.If the engine does not start andthe key is held in START, crankingwill be stopped after 15 secondsto prevent damage. To preventgear damage, cranking is notallowed if the engine is running.


1-4 In Brief

Engine cranking can be stopped byturning the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. SeeStarting the Engine on page 9‑17.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter will work up to20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

Press the key release button toextend the key blade. The key canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press K to unlock the driver door orall doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

PressV to open the trunk.

Press and release 7 to locate thevehicle.

Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.


In Brief 1-5

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑4.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:. Use the key in the driver door to

lock all doors or unlock thedriver door only.

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the centrallocking switch.

. Pull the door handle. Pulling thedoor handle again unlatchesthe door.

. Use the lock knob on the top ofthe door panel.


1-6 In Brief

For more information see:. Door Locks on page 2‑6.. Central Locking System on

page 2‑7.

LiftgateTo lock or unlock the liftgate fromthe outside, press Q or K on theRKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

To lock or unlock the liftgate fromthe inside, press Q or K on thecentral locking switch located on thecenter stack.

To open the liftgate from outside ofthe vehicle:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter,then use the touch pad.

. PressV on theRKE transmitter.

See Liftgate (Hatchback) onpage 2‑10.

Trunk ReleaseTo lock or unlock the trunk from theoutside, press Q or K on the RKEtransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

To lock or unlock the trunk from theinside, press Q or K on the centrallocking switch located on the centerstack.


In Brief 1-7

To open the trunk from outside ofthe vehicle:



See Trunk (Sedan) on page 2‑8 andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

WindowsManual Windows

Use the window crank to open andclose each window.

See Manual Windows on page 2‑14.

Power Windows

Push the switch down to open thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to close it.

The switches work when thevehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained

Accessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19.

See Power Windows on page 2‑15.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.


1-8 In Brief

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.


In Brief 1-9

Second Row SeatsThe rear seatbacks can be foldeddown to increase cargo space.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑8.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑4.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑10.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑11.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑12.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑39.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26.


1-10 In Brief

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑11.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Manual Outside Mirrors

Move the control up, down, or sideto side to adjust the mirror.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Power Outside Mirrors

For vehicles with power outsidemirrors:

1. Select the mirror by moving theselector switch to L for the driverside or R for the passenger side.

2. Use the control knob to movethe mirror in the desireddirection.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Interior Mirror

Hold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview behind your vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑14.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up,down, forward, and backward.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the headliner above the rearseats.

9 : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

H : Press to turn the lamps onautomatically when a door isopened.

R : Press to turn on the dome lamps.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with front readinglamps, they are located in theoverhead console.

# or$ : Press to turn each lampon or off.

For more information about interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑5 orCourtesy Lamps on page 6‑5.


1-12 In Brief

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to theoutboard side of the steeringcolumn.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, sidemarker lamps, andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Sedan

Hatchback

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.


In Brief 1-13

Hatchback Shown, Sedan Similar

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turnthex INT band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL : Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3. For vehicles with a rearwindow wiper/washer, see RearWindow Wiper/Washer on page 5‑4.

Climate ControlsFor vehicles with these climatecontrol systems, the heating,cooling, and ventilation can becontrolled for the vehicle.

Climate Control System withHeater and Air Conditioning

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

E. Air Conditioning

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

Climate Control System withHeater Only


B. Fan Control


D. Rear Window Defogger

E. Recirculation

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.


1-14 In Brief

Transmission

Automatic Transmission

Manual Mode

This position allows you to changegears similar to a manualtransmission. To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of theshift lever to upshift, or pushthe − (minus) end of the buttonto downshift.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑25.

Manual Transmission

Up‐Shift Light

Vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission may have an up-shiftlight. This light indicates when toshift to the next higher gear forbetter fuel economy.

For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift whenthe light comes on, if weather, road,and traffic conditions allow.

It is normal for the light to go onand off if the accelerator positionchanges quickly. Ignore the lightduring downshifts.


In Brief 1-15

Reverse Lockout

The manual transmission isequipped with a lock ring toprevent shifting into R (Reverse). Toshift into R (Reverse), press downthe clutch pedal, lift up the ringon the shift lever, and shift intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑26.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O /VOL: Press to turn the systemon or off.

Turn to increase or decrease thevolume.

When the system is on, press andrelease to mute the system. Pressand release again to turn the soundback on.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choose FM,AM, or XM™ (if equipped).

SEEK ¨ :. Radio: Seeks the next station.. CD: Select the next track or fast

forwards within a track.

© SEEK :. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Select the previous track or

rewinds within a track.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to navigate theavailable menus. Turn to search forstations.

CD/AUX: Press to play a CD whenlistening to the radio.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑5.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.


1-16 In Brief

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to opena favorite page or to switch toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe station.

See “Storing a Favorite Station”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑9.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive the XMservice.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See “XM Satellite Radio Service”under Satellite Radio on page 7‑11.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the storage area tothe right of the infotainment system.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB storage devicesmay be connected, depending onthe audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑16.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)on page 7‑25 or Bluetooth(Overview) on page 7‑19 orBluetooth (Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑21.


In Brief 1-17

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio steering wheel controlscould differ depending on thevehicle's options. Some audiosteering wheel controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth or OnStarsystems.

$ /i : Press to reject anincoming call, or end a currentcall. Press to silence the vehiclespeakers while using theinfotainment system. Pressagain to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD/MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + or − to increase ordecrease the volume.

See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

Cruise Control

5 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up toresume a previously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downto set a speed or to make thevehicle decelerate.


1-18 In Brief

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑33.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentpanel cluster. It shows the status ofmany vehicle systems. The controlsfor the DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.

A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item when it isdisplayed.

B. wx : Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.

C. MENU: Press to display the DICmenu items. This button is alsoused to return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet located in front of thecupholders on the center floorconsole.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Sunroof

On vehicles with this feature, thesunroof only operates when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive.


In Brief 1-19

Open/Close: To open the sunroof,press and hold the rear of theswitch. To close the sunroof, pressand hold the front of the switch.

Vent: Press and hold the front ofthe switch to vent the sunroof.

Manually close the sunshade.

The sunroof will not operate if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

See Sunroof on page 2‑17.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The Traction Control System (TCS)limits wheel spin. The system is onwhen the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g located on the centerconsole. The Traction Offlight i illuminates.

. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button g again to turntraction control back on.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑29.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off both traction

control and StabiliTrak, pressand hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g until the Traction Off

light i and the StabiliTrak Off

light g illuminate.

. Press the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g again to turn on bothsystems.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑31.


1-20 In Brief

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑46.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 10‑59.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑57.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the Code 82 DICmessage when it is necessary tochange the engine oil and filter.

Remember, the oil life display mustbe reset after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life systempress the SET/CLR button while theoil life display is active.


In Brief 1-21

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC MENU button andthumbwheel, scroll until youreach Remaining Oil Life onthe DIC.

2. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%. Whenprompted, use the thumbwheelto highlight YES or NO. Pressthe SET/CLEAR button toconfirm.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handleinside the vehicle. It is locatedon the lower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Go the front of the vehicle andmove the secondary hoodrelease lever to the right side ofthe vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,located in front of the enginecompartment. Securely place thehood prop into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

See Hood on page 10‑4.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


1-22 In Brief

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:

U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login”)

Canada: chevroletowner.ca

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-7Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsTrunk (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Liftgate (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,see Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter will work up to20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑3.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

The following buttons are on thetransmitter:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound to

indicate locking; see “RemoteLock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑27.

If any door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. Thesesettings can be modified. See“Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors; see“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27. The turn signalindicators flash to indicate unlockinghas occurred. For more informationsee “Remote Unlock Feedback”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27. Pressing K may alsodisarm the theft-deterrent system.See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.



V (Remote Trunk Release):Press to open the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps. Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain, or the key is placed in theignition and turned to ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ withinfive seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑4.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitteris programmed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. See your dealer tohave new transmitters programmed.

Battery Replacement

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying with a finger.

3. Remove the old battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control will default tothe last used heating or coolingmode. If the vehicle has heatedseats, they may come on during aremote start. See Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑7.



Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑3.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUNbefore driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine hasbeen running for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

After this, the vehicle's ignitionswitch must be turned to ON/RUNand then back to LOCK/OFF usingthe key, before the remote startprocedure can be used again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.



Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. The malfunction indicator lamp

is on.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts, or a

single remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the doors fromoutside the vehicle:. Use the key in the driver door to

lock all doors or unlock thedriver door only.

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.



To lock or unlock the doors frominside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the centrallocking switch.

. Pull the door handle. Pulling thedoor handle again unlatchesthe door.

. Use the lock knob on the top ofthe door panel.

Central Locking SystemThis system allows for the doorsand liftgate/trunk to be locked andunlocked from the RKE transmitteror the central locking switch locatedon the center stack.

The system can be programed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27.

Door Ajar Reminder

If one of the doors, the trunk, or theliftgate is not closed properly whilethe ignition is on, the door ajar lighton the instrument panel comes onand stays on until the doors areclosed.

Delayed Locking

Pressing Q on the central lockingswitch or on the RKE transmitterwhen this feature is on will delaythe locking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. Three chimes will signalthat delayed locking is in use. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed so thatwhen the doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) for automatictransmissions, or when the vehiclespeed is above 13 km/h (8 mph) formanual transmissions, the doorsand the trunk/liftgate will lock.



To unlock the doors and the trunk/liftgate:

. Press K on the center stack.

. For vehicles with an automatictransmission, shift thetransmission into P (Park).

. For vehicle with a manualtransmission, remove the keyfrom the ignition.

This feature can be programmed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑27.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. An indicator lightcomes on when activated.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.

Doors

Trunk (Sedan)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass throughthe seal between the bodyand the trunk/hatch or liftgate.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

To lock or unlock the trunk from theoutside, press Q or K on the RKEtransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

To lock or unlock the trunk from theinside, press Q or K on the centrallocking switch located on the centerstack.

To open the trunk from outside ofthe vehicle:



See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor point

when securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handle onthe underside of the trunk lid. Thishandle will glow following exposureto light. Pull the release handledown to open the trunk from theinside.



Liftgate (Hatchback)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass throughthe seal between the bodyand the trunk/hatch or liftgate.Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


To lock or unlock the liftgate fromoutside the vehicle, press Q or Kon the RKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

To lock or unlock the liftgate fromthe inside, press Q or K on thecentral locking switch located on thecenter stack.

To open the liftgate from outside ofthe vehicle:



See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

When closing the liftgate, close fromthe center to ensure that it fullylatches.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, close all of thewindows and doors and then either:

. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

. Lock the vehicle using the key inthe driver door.

The alarm arms after about30 seconds.

The security light, located in thecenter of the instrument panel, willflash slowly.

Press Q again and the system armsimmediately.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system press K onthe RKE transmitter.

Turning off the System Alarm

If there is an attempt to open thedoors, trunk, liftgate, or hoodwithout first pressing K on thetransmitter or unlocking the driverdoor with the key, the system alarmwill be activated. The exterior lampswill flash and the horn will sound forabout 30 seconds.

To turn off the system alarmpress Q or K on the RKEtransmitter.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.



The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Manual Mirrors

Move the control up, down, or sideto side to adjust the mirror.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Power Mirrors

For vehicles with power outsidemirrors:

1. Select the mirror by moving theselector switch to L for the driverside or R for the passenger side.

2. Use the control knob to movethe mirror in the desireddirection.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Folding Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with this feature:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. See“Rear Window and Outside MirrorDefogger” under Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview behind your vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when a window ispartially open. To reduce the sound,open another window or the sunroof(if equipped).

Manual WindowsIf equipped, use the window crankto open and close each window.

The rear windows do not open fully.



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

If equipped, push the switch downto open the window. Pull the front ofthe switch up to close it.

The switches work when thevehicle is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-down orexpress-up feature allow the windowto be lowered or raised withoutholding the switch. The driverwindow has express-down andexpress-up. Pull a window switch upor push it down all the way, releaseit, and the window goes up or downautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch in thesame direction a second time orbriefly operating the switch to thefirst detent in either direction.

Safety Function

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express-upfeature is active, the window willstop and auto-reverse to a presetposition. Weather conditions maycause the window to auto-reverse.The window switch may be held upto the second position to close thewindow. The window will returnto normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.



Safety Function Override

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the windows willneed to be reprogrammed for theexpress-up feature to work. Beforereprogramming, replace or rechargethe vehicle's battery.

To program the driver window:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when RAP is active, close alldoors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

Presso to disable the rear windowswitches.

Presso again to return to normalwindow operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down thesun visors. You can also removethem from the center mount andswing them to the side.

Visor Vanity Mirror

Vanity mirrors are on the back of thesun visors. Swing down the sunvisor and open the cover.



Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with this feature, thesunroof only operates when theignition is turned to ON/RUN orRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive.

Open/Close: To open the sunroof,press and hold the rear of theswitch. To close the sunroof, pressand hold the front of the switch.

Vent: Press and hold the front ofthe switch to vent the sunroof.

Manually close the sunshade.

The sunroof will not operate if thevehicle has an electrical failure.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.

Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-21When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-30

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-31Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-36Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-38Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Front OutboardPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Front Seats

The front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechances of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.



To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver seatonly when the vehicle is notmoving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.



2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Front Seat Armrest

There is an armrest on the inboardside of the driver seat. To raise orlower the armrest, push up or pulldown on the armrest.



Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the climatecontrol system. To operate, theengine must be running.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat. The indicator lighton the control turns on when thisfeature is on. Press the controlagain to turn this feature off.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, theheated seats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the control to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights donot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑4.



Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Fold a seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Make sure the safety belt is inthe retainer hook.

Sedan Shown, Hatchback Similar

2. Reach under the belt and pullthe lever on top of the seatbackto unlock the seatback.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

3. Fold the seatback down.

Repeat Steps 1–3 for the otherseatback, if desired.



Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To raise a seatback:

1. Lift the seatback up and pushit rearward to lock it in place.Make sure the safety belt is inthe retainer hook and is nottwisted or caught in theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

The center rear safety beltmay lock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, let thebelt go back all the way andstart again.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for theother seatback, if necessary.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑10.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!



When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑32 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑34.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.



There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the beltlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt

would apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.



The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑17.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructionson use and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thebelt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑11.

To move it down, press the releasebutton (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle may have safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, side, or rear crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners, if equipped, workonly once. If the pretensionersactivate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably othernew parts of the vehicle's safety beltsystem will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑18.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Safety belt comfort guides areavailable through your dealer.

To install the adjustable comfortguide to the seatback and thesafety belt:

1. Locate the anchor loop on therear outboard seatback, nearthe top.

2. Attach the adjustable comfortguide to the anchor loop bythreading the hook throughthe loop.

3. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



4. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

5. The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. You canmake it longer or shorter bysqueezing both ends of theplastic adjuster and pulling onthe elastic cord or the guide.

6. Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to,but not contacting, the neck.Improper comfort guideadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

7. Buckle and position the safetybelt as described previously inthis section. Make sure thatthe shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Un-hook the guide from the loopon the seat. Store the guide in aconvenient place like the glove boxfor the next time it is needed.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑10.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑18.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensioners,if equipped, checked if the vehiclehas been in a crash, or if the airbagreadiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or while you aredriving. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 5‑11.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags except where noted below:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags on models sold in Canada:. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. Seat-mounted side impact

airbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑23.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blinkof an eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑32 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑34.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag, if equipped,is below the steering column. Thefront outboard passenger kneeairbag, if equipped, is below theglove box.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

If the vehicle has second rowseat‐mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Frontal knee airbags, if equipped,are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal impacts that exceed apredetermined deploymentthreshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbags

inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andfront passenger. The vehicle mayhave seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second row outboardpassengers. The vehicle hasroof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑19. Seat-mounted sideimpact airbags, if equipped, androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof‐rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact airbags, if equipped,and roof-rail airbags will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.



Roof‐rail airbags are notintended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbag,if equipped, is intended to inflate onthe side of the vehicle that is struck.Both roof‐rail airbags will inflatewhen either side of the vehicle isstruck or if the sensing systempredicts that the vehicle is about toroll over on its side, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑21.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof‐rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof‐rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑23 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑21.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There may



be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑14.



. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. check.If you use remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle, you may not seethe system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑11.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. The front outboard passengerseat is occupied by a smallerperson, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.



The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbag to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag isactive.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending uponthe person's seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (FrontOutboard Passenger Seat) onpage 3‑48 or Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Seat) onpage 3‑45.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion. Also makesure the child restraint is nottrapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.



If the on indicator is still lit, securethe child in the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicle, andcheck with your dealer.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is notsitting properly in the seat.

Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additionalmaterial, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipmentsuch as seat covers, seat heaters,and seat massagers can affecthow well the passenger sensingsystem operates. We recommendthat you not use seat covers orother aftermarket equipmentexcept when approved byGM for your specific vehicle.



See Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑30 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbagsystem from working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and

diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed underor on top of the seat fabric, couldalso interfere with the operationof the passenger sensing system.



This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

The vehicle has rollover roof‐railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10‑54 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason,call Customer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbag

readiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑21. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and your

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be

sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash,infants need complete support.In a crash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.



{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.



Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑39 formore information. Children can be

endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.



In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a child

restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visorsays,“Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint would

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

be very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑26 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or child

restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in

the vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.



Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, nearthe crease between the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover for sedanmodels or near the anchors onhatchback models.

Sedan

For sedan models, the top tetheranchors are under the coversbehind the rear seat on the fillerpanel. Pull open the cover to accessthe top tether anchors. Be sure touse an anchor on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.



Hatchback

For hatchback models, the toptether anchors are on the back ofthe rear seatbacks. Remove thecargo cover before installing the toptether. The cargo cover shouldremain off while the top tether is inuse. Be sure to use an anchor onthe same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑38 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safety

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Open the cover,if equipped, to access thetop tether anchors.

2.3. For hatchback models,remove the cargo coverbefore installing the toptether. The cargo covershould remain off while thetop tether is in use.



2.4. Route and tighten the toptether according to yourchild restraint instructionsand the followinginstructions:

. If the position youare using does nothave a headrest orhead restraint andyou are using asingle tether, routethe tether over theseatback.

. If the position youare using does nothave a headrest orhead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

. If the position youare using has anadjustable headrestor head restraint andyou are using asingle tether, raisethe headrest or headrestraint and routethe tether under theheadrest or headrestraint and inbetween theheadrest or headrestraint posts.



. If the position youare using has anadjustable headrestor head restraint andyou are using a dualtether, raise theheadrest or headrestraint and routethe tether under theheadrest or headrestraint and aroundthe headrest or headrestraint posts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and back

and forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properly after acrash, see your dealer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑39 for top tether anchorlocations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑38.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle safety belt through oraround the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.





4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Securing Child Restraints(Front OutboardPassenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑38.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑11 formore information on this, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for how toinstall your child restraint usingLATCH. If a child restraint is securedusing a safety belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for top tetheranchor locations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.





5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the off symbol is not lit, see “Ifthe On Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑26 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle's safety beltand let it go back all the way.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Luggage/Load LocationsLoad Compartment(Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover (Hatchback) . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

Lift up on the lever to open.

If equipped, the storage area mayhave an auxiliary input jack andUSB port inside.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

Luggage/LoadLocations

Load Compartment(Hatchback)The load compartment cover can beused to conceal objects under it orremoved and placed on the bottomof the load compartment to carrylarger loads.

To remove the load compartmentcover:

1. Lift up on the load compartmentcover and pull out.

2. Store the load compartmentcover on the bottom of the loadcompartment.


4-2 Storage

To install the load compartmentcover:

1. Align the front sides of the loadcompartment cover into the slotson both sides at the front of theload compartment.

2. Lower the load compartmentcover onto the lip around theload compartment.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Cover (Hatchback)

{ WARNING

An unsecured cargo cover couldstrike people in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash. Store thecargo cover securely or remove itfrom the vehicle.

The cargo cover can be used tocover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cargo cover:

1. Remove both of the cords fromthe hooks at the top of theliftgate.

2. Push up on the underside of thecargo cover at both pins at thefront sides of the cargo cover.

To install the cargo cover:

1. Align the clips on the undersideof the cargo cover over the pinson both sides of the cargo areaand push down.

2. Reconnect both of the cords tothe hooks at the top of theliftgate.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Owner Manual Indicator . . . . . 5-15Code Set Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-27


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel up,down, forward, and backward.

3. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith Bluetooth or OnStar, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Voice Recognition) onpage 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Overview)on page 7‑19 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑21 or OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on.

For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Source): Press to selectan audio source.

Use to scroll up or down to selectthe next or previous favorite radiostation or CD/MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.



Windshield Wiper/Washer

Sedan

Hatchback

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column.

Move the lever to one of thefollowing positions:

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

Hatchback Shown, Sedan Similar

INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn thex INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

nL (Windshield Washer): Pullthe windshield wiper lever towardyou to spray windshield washerfluid and activate the wipers. Thewipers will continue until the lever isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the windshieldwiper lever is released, additionalwipes may occur depending on how

long the windshield washer hadbeen activated. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑20 for information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑26.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.



Rear Window Wiper/WasherFor vehicles with the rear wiper/washer, the controls are on the endof the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

= (Rear Washer): Push thewindshield wiper lever forward tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑20.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna,located on the roof, for long periodsof time with objects that mayinterfere with the antenna's abilityto receive a satellite signal. Thecompass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again.



ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. See Operation on page 7‑5for information about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date:

1. Press the TP (Time Program)button or H (depending onradio).

2. Select Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the next value.

6. To save the time or dateand return to the Time andDate Settings menu, pressthe / BACK button at any timeor press the MENU/TUNE knobafter adjusting the minutesor year.

To set the 12/24 hour format:



3. Highlight Set Time Format.

4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

To set the month and day format:



3. Highlight Set Date Format.

4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob toselect MM/DD/YYYY (month/day/year), or DD/MM/YYYY(day/month/year), or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day).

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessorypower outlet located in front of thecupholders on the center floorconsole.



Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory power plugsmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑40.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter,it is located in the center floorconsole.

The ignition must be turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. When the lighter is ready itwill pop back out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe vehicle may have a removableashtray.

The removable ashtray can beplaced in the front cupholders. Toopen the removable ashtray, lift thelid of the ashtray. After using, closethe lid.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

United States Manual Transmission Shown, Canada Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

Odometer

The odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer measures thedistance the vehicle has beendriven since the function was lastreset.

To reset the trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button onthe lower right of the tachometer.The reset button resets only the tripodometer that is being displayed.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel is left when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN.

When the tank nears empty, thelow fuel warning light will come on.There is still a little fuel left, but thevehicle's fuel tank should be filledsoon. See Low Fuel Warning Lighton page 5‑20 for more information.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates on which side of thevehicle the fuel door is located.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The indicator moves a little whenturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

This cycle continues several timesif the front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag'selectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑19.

This light comes on when thevehicle is started, and it will flash fora few seconds. When the light goesout this indicates the system isfunctioning properly.

If the airbag readiness light stayson or comes on while driving, theairbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle servicedright away.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.



United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or the on or off symbolto let you know the status of thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced right

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light will come on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on, and theengine is not running, as a check toshow it is working.

It should go out when the engine isstarted. If it stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery. If a short



distance must be driven with thelight on, turn off all accessories,such as the radio and air conditionerto help reduce the drain on thebattery.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑15 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. This couldalso result in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.



To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel to

evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑35.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment and

diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments mayhave programs to inspect theon-vehicle emission controlequipment. For the inspection,the emission system test equipmentis connected to the vehicle’s DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.



The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. Seeyour dealer for assistance inverifying proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.

If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Service Vehicle SoonLight

For vehicles with this light, it comeson if a condition exists that mayrequire the vehicle to be taken in forservice.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Owner Manual Indicator

This symbol is shown when youneed to see the owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Code Set Indicator

This indicator displays with anumber when a code is set.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned to ON.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not fully release. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,carefully pull off the road and stop.The pedal may be harder to push ormay go closer to the floor. It maytake longer to stop. If the light is still

on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑77.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF or if the light comeson, stop as soon as possible andturn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system.If the light still stays on, or comeson again while driving, the vehicleneeds service. See your dealer.



If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the brakes will stillwork, but the antilock brakes will notwork. If the regular brake systemwarning light is also on, the antilockbrakes will not work and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

The ABS warning light will come onbriefly when the ignition is turned toON/RUN. This is normal. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn if there isa problem.

Up-Shift Light

For manual transmission vehicles,there is an up-shift light that comeson in the lower DIC area. It showswhen to shift to the next higher gearfor best fuel economy.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑26.

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If this warning light comes on afterthe vehicle ignition is started orwhile driving, the speed sensitivepower steering may not be working.See your dealer for service.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑29 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑31.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑29 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑31.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine which



feature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑31 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑29.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑19. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑19.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑44.



When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignitioncycle. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑47.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not be

covered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required,but if the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

If the vehicle has low engine oilpressure, this light will stay on afterthe engine is started, or come onwhile driving.

This indicates that the engine is notreceiving enough oil. The enginecould be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have itfixed immediately by your dealer.

The oil pressure light could alsocome on in other situations:. When the ignition is on but the

engine is not running, the lightwill come on as a test to show itis working. The light will go outwhen the ignition is turned on.If it does not come on with the

ignition on, there may be aproblem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

. If the vehicle comes to a hardstop, the light may come on for amoment. This is normal.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

This light comes on when thevehicle is low on fuel.

The low fuel warning light comeson when there are approximately6.0 L (1.7 gal) of fuel remaining inthe tank.



To turn the light off, add fuel to thefuel tank. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37.

Immobilizer Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the immobilizersystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑11.

Reduced Engine PowerLight

The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

This light, along with the serviceengine soon light, displays whena noticeable reduction in thevehicle's performance occurs. Stopthe vehicle and turn off the ignition.Wait for 10 seconds and restart thevehicle. This might correct thecondition.

The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. The performance couldbe reduced until the next time thevehicle is driven. If this light stayson, see your dealer as soon aspossible for diagnosis and repair.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.



Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light

This light turns on whenever theDaytime Running Lamps are in use.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 6‑2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

The lamps on reminder light comeson when the exterior lamps are inuse. See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhen the cruise control is on andready, and turns green when thecruise control is set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑33.



Door Ajar Light

This light comes on when a door isopen or not securely latched. Beforedriving, check that all doors areproperly closed.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑27. Allmessages appear in the DICdisplay located in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by usingthe DIC buttons on the turn signallever on the left side of the steeringwheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel,and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

DIC Buttons

A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item displayed.

B. wx (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the menus.

C. MENU: Press to display the DICmenu. This button is also usedto return to or exit the lastscreen displayed on the DIC.



DIC Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the DIC menu displays.Usewx to scroll through themenu items. Not all items areavailable on every vehicle. Thefollowing is a list of all possiblemenu items:. Trip. Average Speed. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Timer. Remaining Oil Life. Units. Language. Tire Learn

Trip

This displays the current distancetraveled, in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), from the last reset for thetrip odometer. See Trip Odometeron page 5‑9 for information onresetting the trip odometer.

Average Speed

Metric

English

This display shows the averagespeed. To reset the averagespeed to zero, press and hold theSET/CLR button while the averagespeed is displayed.



Fuel Range

Metric Shown, English Similar

This displays the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank.

Average Fuel Economy

Metric

English

This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.

To reset the average fuel economy,press and hold the SET/CLR buttonwhile the average fuel economy isdisplayed.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile the timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. The timer will recordup to 99:59 hours, after which thedisplay will return to zero. To stopthe timer, press SET/CLR brieflywhile the timer is displayed. To resetthe timer to zero, press and holdSET/CLR.



Remaining Oil Life

Press MENU to show the remainingoil life display. This display showsan estimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If 99: % is displayed,that means 99% of the current oillife remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the Code 82 message will appearon the display. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible.See Engine Oil on page 10‑9. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended inthe Maintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Remember, the oil life display mustbe reset after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press the SET/CLR button while theoil life display is active. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑12.

Units

Press MENU to show the unitdisplay. Press SET/CLR andmovewx to change units whenUNIT SET is displayed. PressSET/CLR to confirm the setting. Youwill have to select 1, 2, or 3 for theunit display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 isUS units, and 3 is metric units. Thiswill change the displays on thecluster and DIC to the type ofmeasurements you select.

Language

Press MENU to show the languagedisplay. Press SET/CLR andmovewx to change the languageof the displays when LANG SETis displayed. You will have toselect 1 or 2 for the languagedisplay. 1 is Alphabet and 2 isArabic Numeral. Press SET/CLR toconfirm the setting.

Tire Learn

Press MENU to show the tire learndisplay. This display allows formatching of the TPMS sensors. SeeTire Pressure Monitor System onpage 10‑46 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑47.



Vehicle MessagesDIC messages display when thestatus of the vehicle has changedand action may be needed tocorrect the condition. Multiplemessages appear one after another.

Press any of the DIC buttons on theturn signal lever to acknowledgeand clear them from the display.More urgent messages cannotbe cleared from the DIC display.All messages should be takenseriously. Clearing messages willnot correct the problem.

Vehicle messages appear as codenumbers.

15: Center High Mounted BrakeLamp Failure

16: Service Brake Lamps

18: Left Low Beam Failure

20: Right Low Beam Failure

21: Left Front Position LampFailure

22: Right Front Position LampFailure

23: Reversing Lamp Failure

24: License Plate Lamp Failure

25: Left Front Turn Indicator Failure

26: Left Rear Turn Indicator Failure

27: Right Front Turn IndicatorFailure

28: Right Rear Turn IndicatorFailure

82: Change Engine Oil Soon

84: Engine Power Is Reduced

89: Service Vehicle Soon

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls areused to access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Pressto access the ConfigurationSettings menu.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to scrollthrough the menus. Press to enterthe menus and select the menuitems.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press MENU/TUNE to select theVehicle Settings menu.



The following list of menu items maybe available:. Comfort and Convenience. Climate and Air Quality. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tohighlight the menu. Press MENU/TUNE to select it. Each of themenus is detailed in the followinginformation.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Chime Volume. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

Chime Volume

This allows selection of the chimevolume level.

Press MENU/TUNE when ChimeVolume is highlighted. Turn theMENU/TUNE knob to select Normalor High. Press MENU/TUNE toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear

When on and the vehicle on, thisfeature will turn the rear wiperson when the vehicle is placed inR (Reverse) when the front wipersare on.

Press MENU/TUNE whenAuto Wipe in Reverse Gear ishighlighted. Turn the MENU/TUNEknob to select On or Off. PressMENU/TUNE to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Language

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect the language. Press MENU/TUNE to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Exterior Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Exterior Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Exterior Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows selection of whether theexterior lamps will turn on whenunlocking the vehicle.



Press MENU/TUNE whenExterior Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted. Turn the MENU/TUNEknob to select On or Off. PressMENU/TUNE to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Exit Lighting

Press MENU/TUNE when ExitLighting is highlighted. Turn theMENU/TUNE knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press MENU/TUNE to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Auto Door Unlock. Unlock Door Anti Lock Out. Delayed Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park) orthe key is removed.

Press MENU/TUNE when AutoDoor Unlock is highlighted. Turn theMENU/TUNE knob to select AllDoors, Driver Door, or Off. PressMENU/TUNE to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Unlock Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theUnlock Door Anti Lock Out menuwill be available and the door willlock as programmed throughthis menu.

Press MENU/TUNE when UnlockDoor Anti Lock Out is highlighted.Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect On or Off. Press MENU/TUNE to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delaythe locking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. Three chimes will signalthat delayed locking is in use.Pressing either Q or K on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all of the doors.

Press MENU/TUNE when DelayedDoor Lock is highlighted. Turn theMENU/TUNE knob to select On orOff. Press MENU/TUNE to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Startand the following will be displayed:. Remote Unlock Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock



Remote Unlock Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press MENU/TUNE when RemoteUnlock Feedback is highlighted.Turn the MENU/TUNE knob toselect On or Off. Press MENU/TUNE to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press MENU/TUNE when RemoteLock Feedback is highlighted. Turnthe MENU/TUNE knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press MENU/TUNEto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press MENU/TUNE when RemoteDoor Unlock is highlighted. Turn theMENU/TUNE knob to select AllDoors or Driver Door Only. Whenset to Driver Door Only, the driverdoor will unlock the first time K ispressed and all doors will unlockwhen K is pressed a second time.When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock at the first pressof K. Press MENU/TUNE to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settingsto return all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the MENU/TUNEknob to select Yes or No. PressMENU/TUNE to confirm and goback to the last menu.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesBattery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to theoutboard side of the steeringcolumn.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control hasfour positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps


6-2 Lighting

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, press toturn the lamps on or off.

See Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder onpage 5‑22.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

3 (Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger): Push the turn signal/lane change lever away from you toturn the high beams on.

Push the lever again or pull thelever toward you to return to lowbeams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when theDRL are on.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.


Lighting 6-3

The DRL system makes thelow‐beam headlamps come onat a reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the

ON/RUN mode.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the low‐beam headlamps, at a reduced levelof brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL lamps off or onagain, turn the exterior lampscontrol to the off position and thenrelease. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the DRL lamps cannot beturned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamps control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it is not covered,or the headlamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


6-4 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press and momentarily hold thisbutton located on the center stackabove the climate control system, tomake the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble.Press and momentarily hold againto turn the flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Replace anyburned out bulbs. If the bulb is notburned out, check the fuse. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑33 or Bulb Replacement onpage 10‑28 for more information.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is located on theoutboard side of the instrumentpanel.


Lighting 6-5

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. An indicatorlight on the instrument panel clustercomes on when the fog lampsare on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high‐beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high‐beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is located to the leftof the steering column on theinstrument panel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold,to brighten or dim the instrumentpanel controls and infotainmentdisplay screen.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is in theDOOR position.


6-6 Lighting

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the headliner above the rearseats.

9 (Dome Lamp Override): Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.

H (Door): Press to turn the lampson automatically when a door isopened.

R (On): Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with front readinglamps, they are located in theoverhead console.

# or$ : Press to turn each lampon or off.

Lighting Features

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.


Lighting 6-7

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio withCD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-13Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-19Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.


7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) tothe infotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.

Overview (AM-FM Radio)



A. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites). Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

B. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

C. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

D. SEEK ¨. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

E. © SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

F. MENU/TUNE. Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.. CD: Selects tracks.

G. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

H. / BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

I. AUX. Selects external audio

source.

J. H (Clock Menu)

. Opens the Clock menu.

K. 5 / > (Phone Mute)

. Opens the Phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

L. TONE. Opens the Tone menu.

M. INFO (Information). Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

N. CONFIG (Configuration). Opens the

Configuration menu.

O. AUX Port. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) connection

for external devices.



Overview (Radio with CD/USB) A. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

B. Z (Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

C. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

D. AUX Port. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) connection

for external devices.

E. MENU/TUNE. Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.. CD: Selects tracks.

F. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites). Radio: Opens the

favorites list.



G. INFO (Information). Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

H. CD Slot

I. SEEK ¨. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

J. © SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

K. CD/AUX. Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.

L. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

M. H (Clock Menu)

. Opens the Clock menu.

N. TONE. Opens the Tone menu.

O. CONFIG (Configuration). Opens the

Configuration menu.

P. / BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

Q. 5 / > (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the Phone menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system isoperated by using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system is on afterthe ignition is turned off, the systemwill turn off automatically after10 minutes.

Volume Control

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Turn toadjust the volume.

5 / > (Phone/Mute): For vehicleswith OnStar, press and hold 5 / >to mute the infotainment system.Press and hold 5 / > again, or turn

the O /VOL knob to cancel mute.



For vehicles without OnStar,press 5 / > to mute the

infotainment system. Press 5 / >again, or turn the O /VOL knob tocancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/TUNE knob, MENU/TUNE button, and / BACK buttonare used to navigate the menusystem.

MENU/TUNE Knob:

Turn to:. Enter the menu system.. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

MENU/TUNE Button:

Press to:. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

/ BACK:

Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE button toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.



Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE button toactivate the setting.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/TUNE button toselect the character.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the MENU/TUNEbutton until the value changesto 0.

Press the / BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Turn the MENU/TUNEknob to select the valuebetween -12 and +12.




Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Turn the MENU/TUNEknob to select the valuebetween -15 and +15.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles with an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting for Pop, Rock,Classical, Talk, or Country.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the MENU/TUNE button.

2. Select FM menu.

3. Select Favorites list.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the / BACK button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.

1. Press the MENU/TUNE button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Auto volume control.

4. Select the setting.

5. Press the / BACK buttonto go back to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

P /VOL: Press to turn the radio onand off.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween AM, FM, and XM,if equipped.

MENU/TUNE Knob: Turn tonavigate the available menus. Turnto search for stations.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

SEEK ¨ : Press to search for thenext station.

© SEEK: Press to search for theprevious station.

FAV 1-2-3: Press to open thefavorites list and select thefavorites page.

1−6: Press to select presetstations.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped.The last station that was playingstarts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and hold SEEK ¨ or © SEEKuntil the station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Favorites List

1. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.



Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.

3. The first station in the listwill play.

Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall available programming typesdisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.

4. Select the station.

The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station and CategoryLists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored inthe station list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/TUNE button.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to opena favorite page or to switch toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe station.



Satellite Radio

XM Satelite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.comor 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Channel

BAND: Press to choose XM. Thedisplay will show the selection.

SEEK ¨ : Press to seek the nextXM channel.

© SEEK: Press to seek theprevious XM channel.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to go to thenext XM channel.

Storing an XM Channel

Drivers are encouraged to set upXM channel favorites while thevehicle is not moving. Tune tofavorite stations using thepushbuttons, favorites button, andsteering wheel controls. SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3.

A maximum of 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned belowthe radio station frequency labelsand by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV 1-2-3 button).Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to gothrough up to six pages of favorites,each having six favorite stationsavailable per page. Each pageof favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMchannels. To store an XM channelas a favorite:

1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Press and release theFAV 1-2-3 button to displaythe page where the channel is tobe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons untila beep sounds. When thepushbutton is pressed andreleased, the channel that wasset will return.

4. Repeat Steps 1−3 for each XMchannel to be stored as afavorite.

To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press and hold FAV 1-2-3 untilthe radio setup menu displays.

2. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thepushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

3. Press FAV 1-2-3 to return tothe original main radio screenshowing the radio frequencytabs and to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen number of numberedpages.



XM Radio Messages

UPDATING: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

NO SIGNAL: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

LOADING: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

OFF AIR: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

CH UNAVAILABLE: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight-digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

CHECK XM TUNER: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.



XM Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaVehicles without OnStar have afixed mast antenna that canwithstand most car washeswithout being damaged. If themast should ever become slightlybent, straighten it out by hand. If themast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make surethe mast is still tightened to theantenna base located on the roof ofthe vehicle. If tightening is required,tighten by hand.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system(if equipped) may be affected if thesunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.



If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft, lint‐free cloth,or dampen a clean, soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label thetop of the recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD/AUX: Press to use the CDplayer.

SEEK ¨ or © SEEK: Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

MENU/TUNE: Turn to select tracks.Turn to enter the menu. Press toselect the menu.

Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressZ.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.



Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD/AUX button. If thereis a disc in the player, it beginsplaying.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK toselect the next or previous track.

. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks List.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and hold SEEK ¨ or © SEEKto fast forward or rewind within thecurrent track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK toselect the next or previous track.

. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.




Auxiliary DevicesThe optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)input jack or the USB port. The AUXinput jack, if equipped, is located inthe storage area to the right of theinfotainment system. A second AUXinput is located on the front of theinfotainment system. See Overview(AM-FM Radio) on page 7‑2 orOverview (Radio with CD/USB) onpage 7‑4.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑5.

A. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) AuxiliaryInput Jack

B. USB Port

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)jack can only be controlled usingthe controls on the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem:. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes™

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.



Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the / BACK buttonto return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press the/ BACK button to return to the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.




Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 2,500 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.



Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Bluetooth Audio

Streaming Audio

If equipped, music may be playedfrom a paired Bluetooth. SeeBluetooth (Voice Recognition) onpage 7‑25 or Bluetooth (Overview)on page 7‑19 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑21 for help pairing a device.

The music can be controlled bycontrols on the device.

To play music via Bluetooth:

1. Power on the device, pair, andconnect the device. The devicewill displayed “GM AudioSource.”

2. Once paired, press CD orCD/AUX to select BluetoothAudio.

3. Press the play button on thedevice to begin playback.

When selecting Bluetooth audio, theradio may not be able to launch theaudio player on the connecteddevice to start playing. When thevehicle is not moving, choose thephone to begin playback.

All devices launch audio differently.When selecting Bluetooth audio asa source, the radio may show aspaused on the screen. Press playon the device to begin playback.

Some phones support sendingBluetooth music information todisplay on the radio. When the radioreceives this information, it willcheck to see if any album art isavailable and display it. For moreinformation about your phone andsupported Bluetooth features, seewww.gm.com/bluetooth.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Takingyour eyes off the road too long ortoo often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to controlthe system. The system can beused while in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainmentsystem allows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑5.

5 / > (Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise. Donot point the center air vents directlyupward.



When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Usethe O /VOL knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑5.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability can be pairedseparately to the vehicle as aphone and an MP3 player at thesame time. This requires thedevice to be paired two times;once as a “hands-free” deviceand once as an MP3 device.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.



. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone as a Hands-FreeDevice

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device(Hands-Free). A four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN) appears on the display.The PIN is used is Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on-screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.







5. Select the new phone to linkto and follow the on-screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone's owner's guideor contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 / > once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/TUNE buttonto scroll through the entirelist of names/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑5.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to accept the call.



Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/TUNE knob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNE knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Enteringa Character Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑5.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeatSteps 1−4. The number ofcallers that can be added islimited by your wireless servicecarrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/TUNEknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑5.



Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, pressthe b / g button located on thesteering wheel. Use the commandsbelow for the various voice features.For additional information, say"Help" while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability can be paired to thevehicle as a phone and an MP3player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.



This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands-Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.



Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”



Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information onhow to delete this information, seethe previous sections on deletinga paired phone and deletingname tags.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

MaintenanceAir Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Climate ControlSystemsFor vehicles with these climatecontrol systems, the heating,cooling, and ventilation can becontrolled for the vehicle.

Climate Control System withHeater and Air Conditioning


B. Fan Control


D. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

E. Air Conditioning

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

Climate Control System withHeater Only


B. Fan Control


D. Rear Window Defogger

E. Recirculation


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

A (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turning thefan control to 0 turns the fan off. Thefan must be turned on to run the airconditioning compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following air deliverymodes:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the rear outlets.

W (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the floor, windshield, andside window outlets.

1 (Defrost): This mode clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Forvehicles with air conditioning,follow these steps to use thesystem. TurnA to the desiredspeed. The air conditioning does notoperate when the fan control knob isin the off position. Press# to turnthe air conditioning on and off.When# is pressed, an indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. PressM.

3. Press#.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highestA speed.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time may cause theair inside the vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening,after the air in the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

M (Recirculation): This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle. It canbe used to prevent outside air andodors from entering the vehicle.


Climate Controls 8-3

Press the button to turn therecirculation mode on. An indicatorlight comes on to show that therecirculation is on. Press the buttonagain to return to outside air mode.

Using the recirculation mode forextended periods may cause thewindows to fog. If this happens,select the defrost mode.

M / L Heated Seats(If Equipped): Press to heat thedriver or passenger seat. SeeHeated Front Seats on page 3‑7.

Rear Window and OutsideMirror Defogger

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear window andoutside mirror defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the feature is on.

The rear window defogger turns offafter about 10 minutes. It can alsobe turned off by pressing1 againor by turning the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.If turned on again it runs for aboutfive minutes before turning off.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on withthe rear window defogger and helpto clear fog or frost from the surfaceof the mirror. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2‑13.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Air VentsUse the air vents located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow. Move the slats on the centerair vents to direct airflow.

Turn the knobs on the side air ventscounterclockwise or clockwise toopen or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside thevehicle more effectively.


8-4 Climate Controls

Maintenance

Air IntakeClear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom the air intake at the base of thewindshield that can block the flow ofair into the vehicle.

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

1. Open the glove box completelyand pull it to remove.

2. Remove the filter cover byunscrewing both sides of thecover.

3. Install the new air filter.

4. Reinstall the air filter cover andglove box in reverse order.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDriving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Shifting out of Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-24Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-26

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-35Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-36California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-36Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do notread, take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, suchas programming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment sectionfor more information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑10.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to be

careless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.



Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

Your vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering wheel is turned ineither direction several times until itstops, or it is held until it is stoppedfor an extended time, powersteering assist should return shortlyafter a few normal steeringmovements.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messageson page 5‑27.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve, while the front wheels arestraight.

. Adjust speed so you can drivethrough the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed.

. Wait until out of the curve beforeaccelerating gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in the lane, or achild darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you.These problems can be avoided bybraking— if you can stop in time.

If you cannot fully stop, follow thesesuggestions:. Quickly apply the brakes to

remove as much speed aspossible from a collision.

. Steer around the problem, tothe left or right depending onavailable space.

. Straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.



. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑38.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.



Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills.Something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.



Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑28 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icy

when the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.


Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑57.



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑77.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's center



pillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑38 andTire Pressure on page 10‑44.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

This vehicle is neither designednor intended to tow a trailer.



Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).



Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to thevehicle's center pillar (B-pillar).

The label tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR forthe vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.



And, if there is a heavy load, itshould be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and the regularbrake pedal applied.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.

This position locks the steeringwheel, ignition, and transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.



3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑29.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulledover, and must be shut off whiledriving, turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,

and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This isthe position in which you canoperate things like the radio andthe windshield wipers when theengine is off.

C (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. This positioncan also be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the ignition.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.



This system is to prevent ignitionkey removal unless the shift lever isin P (Park).

The key lock release will not work ifthe battery is charged less than9-volts, or uncharged. Try chargingor jump starting the battery. SeeJump Starting on page 10‑74.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, there is amanual key lock release. Locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert atool or key into the opening. Locatethe lever, and press it toward thedriver while removing the key fromthe ignition.

Starting the Engine

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal to the floorand start the engine. The vehiclewill not start if the clutch pedal is notall the way down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine cranks, let goof the key. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm.

The vehicle has aComputer‐ControlledCranking System. It assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition keyis turned to START and thenreleased when the engine

begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for afew seconds or until the enginestarts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventdamage. To prevent geardamage, cranking is not allowedif the engine is running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.

Notice: Holding the key in STARTfor longer than 15 seconds at atime will cause the battery to bedrained much sooner. And theexcessive heat can damagethe starter motor. Wait about15 seconds between each try tohelp avoid draining the battery ordamaging the starter.

2. If the engine does not start, waitabout 15 seconds and try again.Wait about 15 seconds betweeneach try.



When the engine has run about10 seconds to warm up, thevehicle is ready to be driven. Donot run the engine at high speedwhen it is cold.

If the weather is below freezing(0°C or 32°F), let the engine runfor a fewminutes to warm up.

3. If the engine still will not start,or starts but then stops, it couldbe flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forabout three seconds. If thevehicle starts briefly but then

stops again, do the same thing,but this time keep the pedaldown for five or six seconds.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If electrical parts oraccessories are added, youcould change the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-upin cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord islocated in the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery. It is shipped from the



factory with a tie holding it inplace. Use care in removingthe tie so that the cord is notdamaged.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroofwill continue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened.

The radio will work when the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the radio willcontinue to work for 10 minutes afterthe last input (button press, knobturn) to the radio is detected.

It is possible to turn the radio backon at any time after it has timed outusing the Power knob. The radio willbe functional for 10 minutes after thelast input (button press, knob turn)to the radio is detected.



Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑29 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pressing the button on theshift lever and pushing the leverall the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold thebrake pedal down. Then see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing thebutton on the shift lever. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill andyou do not shift your transmissioninto P (Park) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).



This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift intoP (Park) properly before you leavethe driver seat. To find out how,see “Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission)” in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park(Automatic Transmission)This vehicle is equipped with a shiftlock control. The shift lock control isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock control is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

The doors may lock when shiftingfrom P (Park). See Automatic DoorLocks on page 2‑7.



ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse) if parking on a downhillslope. On a level surface or anuphill slope, use 1 (First) gear.Firmly apply the parking brake. Turnthe wheels toward the curb for adownhill slope, or away from thecurb for an uphill slope. Once theshift lever has been placed into gearwith the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key, and release theclutch.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, see Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission) onpage 9‑20.



AutomaticTransmission

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑20.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has a shift lock control.You must fully apply the brake pedalthen press the shift lever buttonbefore you can shift from P (Park)while the ignition key is in ON/RUN.

If you cannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift leverand push the shift lever all theway into P (Park) as you maintainbrake application. Then move theshift lever into another gear. SeeShifting out of Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑21.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, use



N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

M (Manual Mode): This position,allows you to change gears similarto a manual transmission. If thevehicle has this feature, see“Manual Mode” following.

Manual ModeTo use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual Mode).

While driving in manual mode,the transmission will remainin the driver selected gear.

When coming to a stop in themanual position, the vehiclewill automatically shift into1 (First) gear.

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of theshift lever to upshift, or pushthe − (minus) end of the buttonto downshift.



The Driver Information Center (DIC)in the instrument cluster will changefrom the currently displayedmessage to the letter “M,” forManual position, and a numberindicating the requested gear.

While using manual mode, thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. You canuse this for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm):. The transmission will not

automatically shift to the nexthigher gear if the vehicle speedor engine rpm is too low.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too high.

Manual Transmission

The vehicle may be equipped witha five‐speed or six‐speed manualtransmission.

Notice: Shifting the vehicleinitially into any gear otherthan 1 (First) or R (Reverse) candamage the clutch. Shift themanual transmission in theproper sequence, and time thegear shifting with the acceleratorto avoid revving the engine anddamaging the clutch.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as youpress the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) whengoing less than 32 km/h (20 mph).If you have come to a complete stopand it is hard to shift into 1 (First),put the shift lever in Neutral and letup on the clutch. Press the clutchpedal back down. Then shift into1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth),and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth)(if equipped) the same way as for2 (Second). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.



To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, pressdown the clutch pedal, lift up thering on the shift lever, and shift intoR (Reverse). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Up‐Shift Light

Vehicles equipped with a manualtransmission may have an up-shiftlight. This light indicates when toshift to the next higher gear forbetter fuel economy.

For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on, and if the weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

It is normal for the light to go onand off if the accelerator positionchanges quickly. Ignore the lightduring downshifts.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑16.

If driving safely on a wet road andit becomes necessary to slam onthe brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down and pull up on theparking brake lever. If the ignition ison, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑16.

To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down. Pull theparking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold therelease button in as you move thebrake lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s), and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.



TCS is on whenever the vehicleis started. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCS can beturned off if needed.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, a message may be displayedon the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑27. When this message isdisplayed and d comes on andstays on, the vehicle is safe to drivebut the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

TCS Off Light

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton g. When TCS is turned off,

the TCS Off light i comes on andthe system will not limit wheel spin.



Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and releasethe TCS/StabiliTrak button again toturn the system back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9. SeeWinter Driving on page 9‑7 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage. Press theappropriate cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑33.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path, andthe direction the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

When the stability control systemactivates, d flashes on theinstrument panel. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, a message is displayedon the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑27. When this message isdisplayed and/or d comes on andstays on, the vehicle is safe to drivebut the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.



If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

StabiliTrak OffLight

TCS Off Light

StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded by pressing and holdingthe TCS/StabiliTrak button g until

the Traction Off light i and the

StabiliTrak Off light g come on in theinstrument panel. When StabiliTrakis turned off, the system will notassist with directional control of thevehicle or limit wheel spin. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button again to turn thesystem back on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Pressthe appropriate cruise control buttonto reengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑33.



Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control, thevehicle can maintain a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morewithout keeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 40 km/h(25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

If the vehicle's Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systembegins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑29 or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑31. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again,the cruise control can be turnedback on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the

cruise control system on and off.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to resumea previously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speed orto make the vehicle decelerate.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.



Setting Cruise Control

If 1 is on when not in use, it couldget bumped and go into cruise whennot desired. Keep 1 off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

To set cruise control:

1. Press 1.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel down toSET/‐ and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor clutch for manual transmissionsare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe thumbwheel up toward RES/+

briefly. The vehicle returns to thespeed selected previously and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previousset cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well cruise control works onhills depends on the vehicle speed,load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakesare applied, cruise control isdisengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch for manual transmission.

. Press* on the steering wheel.

. To turn off cruise control,press5 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if the 5 buttonis pressed or if the ignition isturned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.



Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑36 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance might

be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thepassenger side of the vehicle.



To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank. Wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. See“Washing the Vehicle” in ExteriorCare on page 10‑80.

When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationThe vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑30 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑30.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-38Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54


10-2 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-77Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


Vehicle Care 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑30.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑30.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑15.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handleinside the vehicle. It is locatedon the lower left side of theinstrument panel.


Vehicle Care 10-5

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand move the secondary hoodrelease lever toward the rightside of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,located in front of the enginecompartment. Securely place thehood prop into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop fromthe slot in the underside of thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. The prop rod must clickinto place when returning it tothe retainer to prevent hooddamage.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and releaseit so it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

1.4L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

C. Engine Electric Cooling Fan(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑21 andHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑13.

G. Battery on page 10‑23.

H. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑20.

I. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.


10-8 Vehicle Care

1.8L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

C. Engine Electric Cooling Fan(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑9.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑21 andHydraulic Clutch on page 10‑13.

G. Battery on page 10‑23.

H. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.

I. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑20.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engineoil. Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

If the engine oil pressure lightcomes on, check the engine oil levelright away. The oil pressure light ison the instrument panel cluster.See Engine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5‑20. Check the engine oillevel regularly; this is an addedreminder.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground. The engine oildipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the MIN(minimum) mark on the dipstick,add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above the

operating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the proper operatingrange, the engine could bedamaged. You should drain outthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos1 specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A Code 82 (changeengine oil soon) DIC messagecomes on. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑27. Change the oil assoon as possible within the next1 000 km (600mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary forup to a year. The engine oil and

filter must be changed at least oncea year and, at this time, the systemmust be reset. Your dealer hastrained service people who willperform this work and reset thesystem. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC MENU buttonand thumbwheel, scroll until youreach Remaining Oil Life onthe DIC.

2. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%. Whenprompted, use the thumbwheelto highlight YES or NO. Pressthe SET/CLEAR button toconfirm.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

If the Code 82 DIC message comesback on when the vehicle is started,the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.


Vehicle Care 10-13

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, you shouldhave this done at your dealer.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Manual TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The common hydraulic clutch andbrake master cylinder fluid reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to checkthe fluid level or to top‐off the fluidlevel. Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervals.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.


10-14 Vehicle Care

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If thefilter remains covered with dirt, anew filter is required.

To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter:

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine

1. Remove the two screws, tilt thecover, and slide it out of theassembly.

2. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

3. Lower the cover, slide it into theassembly, then secure with thetwo screws.

See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for replacement intervals.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1.4L L4 Engine

A. Engine Electric Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

1.8L L4 Engine

A. Engine Electric Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX‐COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changingsooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000miles(50 000 km) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX‐COOL® (silicate‐free) coolantin the vehicle.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑19.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of cleandrinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have thecoolant changed by an authorizedservice center, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

It is normal to see coolant moving inthe upper coolant hose return linewhen the engine is running.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down.

If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at or above the markpointed to, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant.

Be sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

If no coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank, add coolant as follows:

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at the

indicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.


10-18 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L EngineSimilar

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressurestill left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until youcan feel the upper radiator hosegetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolantsurge tank when the cooling systemhas cooled down. If the coolant isnot at the proper level, repeatSteps 1–3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof the engine overheating.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine. Have the vehicleserviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firebecause of being driven with nocoolant, the vehicle can be badly

damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.


10-20 Vehicle Care

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) for anautomatic transmissionor Neutral for a manualtransmission while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) for an automatictransmission or Neutral for amanual transmission, and let theengine idle.

If the overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When the vehicle needs windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature mayfall below freezing, use a fluid thathas sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


Vehicle Care 10-21

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand could have rear drum brakes orrear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,they do not have wear indicators,but if a rear brake rubbing noise isheard, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brakedrums should be removed andinspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing.Drum brakes have an inspectionhole to inspect lining wear duringscheduled maintenance. When thefront brake pads are replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every moderate brake stop, the discbrakes adjust for wear. If rarelymaking moderate or heavier brakestops, the brakes might not adjustcorrectly. Very carefully making afew moderate brake stops aboutevery 1 600 km (1,000 miles) willadjust the brakes properly.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakesand the brake pedal goes downfarther than normal, the rear drumbrakes might need adjustment.Adjust them by backing up andfirmly applying the brakes a fewtimes.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes— for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thefluid level in the reservoir mightgo down:. The fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,

since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes and/or clutchwill not work well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.


Vehicle Care 10-23

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑29.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


Vehicle Care 10-25

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in neutral.

On all vehicles, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade Replacement

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

Windshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. Seethe Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For properwindshield wiper blade lengthand type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the tabs on each sideof the wiper blade assembly andslide the assembly off the end ofthe wiper arm.

3. Install the new blade onto thearm and make sure the tabs arefully set in the locked position.

4. Repeat the steps for the otherwiper.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Pull the wiper arm a shortdistance away from theglass (A).

2. Pull the blade out fromthe arm (B).

It may require extra effort toremove the old blade.

3. Once the blade pin disengagesfrom the wiper arm, remove thewiper blade by sliding the pin outof the guide hole.

4. Reverse the steps to install thenew blade.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to a dealer forservice.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑32.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

Passenger Side Shown, DriverSide Similar

A. High-Beam Headlamp

B. Low-Beam Headlamp

C. Parking/Turn Signal Lamps

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. For the driver side bulb only,remove the windshield washerbottle filler neck by turning itone-quarter turncounterclockwise and pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.


Vehicle Care 10-29

3. Remove the headlamp bulbaccess cover.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.

5. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb.

6. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

7. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector.

8. Install the headlamp bulb accesscover.

9. For the driver side bulb,replace the windshield washerbottle filler neck by turning itone-quarter turn clockwise intothe bottle.

Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Remove the parking/turn signallamp bulb socket from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise.


10-30 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

Sedan Taillamp Shown, HatchbackTaillamp Similar

A. Back-Up Lamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Stop Lamp/Taillamp

D. Sidemarker Lamp

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the two screws thatsecure the taillamp assembly.

3. Remove the taillamp assemblyby pulling it straight back untilthe two posts disengage fromthe grommets.

4. Remove the bulb socket fromthe taillamp assembly by turningit counterclockwise.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

6. Install a new bulb into the bulbsocket.


Vehicle Care 10-31

7. Install the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

8. Install the taillamp assembly andtighten the two screws.

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it from the fascia.

3. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket (A).

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly into thefascia engaging the clip sidefirst.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Front Parking/TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High‐BeamHeadlamp

9005LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Low‐BeamHeadlamp

H11

RearSidemarker Lamp

194LL

Rear TurnSignal Lamp 4157NAK

Stop Lamp/Taillamp 7444LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuitbreakers, and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of thevehicle, near the battery.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To access the fuses, press the clipstogether, and lift the cover. Toreinstall the cover, push the coveruntil it is secure.


10-34 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Antilock BrakeSystem Valve

2 Sunroof

3 Not Used

4 Rear Wiper

5Regulated VoltageControl

6Antilock BrakeSystem Fluid

7AutomaticOccupantSensing/ROS

8Outside RearviewMirror

9 Not Used

10Rear WindowDefogger

11 Not Used

12Heated OutsideRearview Mirror

13 Heated Front Seat

Mini Fuses Usage

14 Fuel SystemControl Module 1

15 Flex Fuel

16 Washer

17 Fuel Pump (1.8L)

18

Engine ControlModule/TransmissionControl Module

19Fuel SystemControl Module 2

20 Not Used

21Engine ControlModule 1

22 Coil





Vehicle Care 10-35

Mini Fuses Usage

26 Injector

27Engine ControlModule

28Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

29TransmissionControl Module

30 Horn

31 Front Fog Lamps

32 Left High Beam

33 Right High Beam

SPARE Spare

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

2 Front Wiper

3 Blower

4 Run/Crank IEC

J-CaseFuses

Usage

5 Not Used

6 Cooling Fan K5

7 Cooling Fan K4

8 EVP

9 Start

Relays Usage

RLY 1Front WiperControl Relay

RLY 2Front Wiper SpeedRelay

RLY 3 Rear WindowDefogger Relay

RLY 4 Run/Crank Relay

RLY 5 Not Used

RLY 6Fuel PumpRelay (1.8L)

RLY 7Cooling Fan K2Relay (1.4L)

Relays Usage

RLY 8

Cooling FanK3 Relay (1.8L),Cooling Fan K3High CurrentRelay (1.4L)

RLY 9 Powertrain Relay

RLY 10Start High CurrentRelay

RLY 11Air ConditioningCompressor ClutchRelay

RLY 12 High-Beam Relay

RLY 13Cooling Fan K1Relay


10-36 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated on the underside of thedriver side instrument panel.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Number Usage

1 DLIS

2Data LinkConnector

3 Airbag

4 Liftgate

5 Spare

6Body ControlModule

7Body ControlModule

8Body ControlModule

9Body ControlModule

10Body ControlModule




Vehicle Care 10-37

Number Usage

13 Body ControlModule

14Instrument PanelCluster

15 OnStar

16Ultrasonic RearPark Assist

17Driver InformationCenter

18 Audio

19 Trailer

20 VLBS

21 CHEVYSTAR

22Heating,Ventilation, AirConditioning

Number Usage

23 HDLP ALC

24 Clutch

25Instrument PanelCluster/AutomaticOccupant Sensing

26 Airbag Run/Crank

27 Run Relay

28 Liftgate Release

29 Trailer Run/Crank

30 Clock Spring

31Heating,Ventilation, and AirConditioning

32 Spare

33 Sunroof

Number Usage

34 Cigarette Lighter

35 Spare

36Rear PowerWindows

37Front PowerWindows

38 RAP/ACCY

39 DC/DC Converter

40Driver PowerWindow

41 PTC2

42 PTC1

43 Battery Connector


10-38 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,

tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑54.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If the vehicle

has a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑57.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For more

information on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑44.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑44 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings fora tire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 10‑54.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on thevehicle indicates the originalequipment tires and the correctcold tire inflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare shouldbe at 420 kPa (60 psi). SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑47 foradditional information.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

The low tire pressure warning lightcomes on at each ignition cycle untilthe tires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low and mustbe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑44.


10-48 Vehicle Care

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑50, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑50 and Tires onpage 10‑38.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM-approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑59 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. The malfunction light comeson at each ignition cycle until theproblem is corrected. Some of theconditions that can cause this tocome on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight should go off after the roadtire is replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires. Themalfunction light should go offafter successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. Themalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑52.


Vehicle Care 10-49

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight comes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightshould go off at the next ignitioncycle. The sensors are matched tothe tire/wheel positions, using aTPMS relearn tool, in the following

order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Learn menuitem screen.

5. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton to begin the sensormatching process.

6. The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARN messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.


10-50 Vehicle Care

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn soundstwo times to indicate thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to the driverside rear tire, and the TPMSsensor matching process isno longer active. The TIRELEARN message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑51 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑56.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tiresto the recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑44and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑47.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑50 and TireRotation on page 10‑50 for moreinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically need

to be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification (TPCSpec) system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, andtire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number


Vehicle Care 10-53

will be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑38 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacingall the tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on alltires will help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑50and Tire Rotation on page 10‑50for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑46.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑52 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States. Thegrades are molded on thesidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) system doesnot apply to deep tread, wintertires, compact spare tires, tires


Vehicle Care 10-55

with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear oneand a half (1½) times as wellon the government course as atire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.


10-56 Vehicle Care

The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular

basis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicle

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

parts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslow and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑38. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.


10-58 Vehicle Care

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks onboth sides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.


Vehicle Care 10-59

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructionsbelow. Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑67. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑59.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑22.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.


10-60 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealantand compressor kit, there may notbe a spare tire or tire changingequipment, and on some vehiclesthere may not be a place to storea tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) inthe tread area of the tire. It canalso be used to inflate anunderinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑5.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

A. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve

B. Sealant/Air Hose

C. Base of Sealant Canister

D. Tire Sealant Canister

E. On/Off Button

F. Slot on Top of Compressor

G. Pressure Deflation Button

H. Pressure Gauge

I. Power Plug

J. Air Only Hose

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe tire sealant canister (D).


Vehicle Care 10-61

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the tire sealant canister.The tire sealant canister (D) shouldbe replaced before its expirationdate. Replacement tire sealantcanisters are available at your localdealer.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the tire sealantcanister must be replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑57 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealantcanister (D) and compressorfrom its storage location. SeeStoring the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑66.

2. Remove the air only hose (J)and the power plug (I) from thebottom of the compressor.

3. Place the compressor on theground near the flat tire.

4. Attach the air only hose (J) tothe sealant canister inletvalve (A) by turning it clockwiseuntil tight.


10-62 Vehicle Care

5. Slide the base of the tire sealantcanister (C) into the slot on thetop of the compressor (F) to holdit upright.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

6. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

7. Attach the sealant/air hose (B) tothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until tight.

8. Plug the power plug (I) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

10. Press the on/off button (E) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (H) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushesthe sealant into the tire. Oncethe sealant is completelydispersed into the tire, thepressure will quickly drop andstart to rise again as the tireinflates with air only.


Vehicle Care 10-63

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (H). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑44.

The pressure gauge (H) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose from

the tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13‑5.

12. Press the on/off button (E) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed andwill continue to leak airuntil the vehicle is drivenand the sealant is distributedin the tire. Therefore,Steps 13 through 21 mustbe done immediately afterStep 12.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

13. Unplug the power plug (I) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Turn the sealant/air hose (B)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

15. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

16. Remove the tire sealantcanister (D) from the slot ontop of the compressor (F).

17. Turn the air only hose (J)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire sealant canisterinlet valve (A).

18. Turn the sealant/air hose (B)clockwise onto the sealantcanister inlet valve (A) toprevent sealant leakage.

19. Return the air only hose (J)and power plug (I) back to theiroriginal storage location.

20. If the flat tire was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.

21. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

22. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

23. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 10 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑5.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

24. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, or vehicle.

25. Dispose of the used tiresealant canister (D) at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

26. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

27. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

The kit includes:

A. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve

B. Sealant/Air Hose

C. Base of Sealant Canister

D. Tire Sealant Canister

E. On/Off Button


Vehicle Care 10-65

F. Slot on Top of Compressor

G. Pressure Deflation Button

H. Pressure Gauge

I. Power Plug

J. Air Only Hose

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑57 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the compressor from itsstorage location. See Storing theTire Sealant and Compressor Kiton page 10‑66.

2. Remove the air only hose (J)and the power plug (I) from thebottom of the compressor.

3. Place the compressor on theground near the flat tire.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (J) tothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until tight.

6. Plug the power plug (I) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press the on/off button (E) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (H). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑44.


10-66 Vehicle Care

The pressure gauge (H) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor ison. Turn the compressor off toget an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13‑5.

10. Press the on/off button (E) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thecompressor as it could bewarm after usage.

11. Unplug the power plug (I) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the air only hose (J)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Return the air only hose (J)and power plug (I) back to theiroriginal storage location.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas accessory adapters located in acompartment on the bottom of itshousing that can be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the rear storage area.

1. Lift the trim cover.

2. Remove the tire sealantcanister (A) and thecompressor (B).


Vehicle Care 10-67

To store the tire sealant canister andcompressor:

1. Attach the sealant/air hose tothe sealant canister inlet valve.

2. Return the sealant canister andthe compressor to their originalstorage location.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The compact spare tire and toolsare located in the storagecompartment in the rear of thevehicle.

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk or liftgate. SeeTrunk (Sedan) on page 2‑8 orLiftgate (Hatchback) onpage 2‑10.

2. Lift the trim cover.

3. Turn the retainercounterclockwise and remove itfrom the compact spare.

4. Remove the compact spare tire.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 for more information.

A. Extension

B. Jack

C. Wheel Wrench

D. Strap

5. The jack and tools are storedbelow the spare tire. Removethem from their container andplace them near the tire beingchanged.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑57.

2. Remove the wheel cover, if thevehicle has one, to reach thewheel bolts.

3. Turn the wheel nutscounterclockwise to loosenthem. Do not remove them yet.

4. Place the jack at the positionmarked with a half circle.


Vehicle Care 10-69

5. Insert the jack handle into thejack and the wheel wrench ontothe end of the jack handle.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise until the lift head isfirmly contacting the properlifting point nearest the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the compact spare tireto fit underneath the wheel well.


10-70 Vehicle Care

8. Turn the wheel nutscounterclockwise toremove them.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

12. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

13. Lower the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower thejack completely.


Vehicle Care 10-71

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Return the jack and tools to theiroriginal storage location.

2. Replace the trim cover.

3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, inthe rear storage compartment.

If the vehicle is a sedan the flattire should be against the backof the rear seats.

If the vehicle is a hatchback theflat tire should be against theback of the trunk.

4. Attach one end of the strap to acargo tie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

Sedan

Hatchback

5. Route the strap through thewheel, as shown.

6. Attach the other end of the strapto the other cargo tie-down inthe rear of the vehicle.

7. Tighten the strap.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the compact spare tire.

The compact spare tire is fortemporary use only. Replace thecompact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as you can. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 10‑73.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible andcheck that the spare tire is correctlyinflated after installing the spare onthe vehicle. The compact spare isdesigned to perform well at speedsup to 105 km/h (65 mph) fordistances up to 5 000 km (3,000 mi),so a trip can be completed and thefull-size tire repaired or replacedwhen possible. However, thecompact spare tire will last longerand be in good shape if it isreplaced as soon as possible.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑23.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The jump start positive post (A) andnegative post (C) are on the batteryof the vehicle providing the jumpstart.

The jump start positive post (B) andnegative post (D) are on the batteryon the driver side of the vehicle.

The positive jump start connectionis under a trim cover. Open thecover door to expose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park)with an automatic transmission,or Neutral with a manualtransmission. See Shifting IntoPark (Automatic Transmission)on page 9‑20 with an automatic


Vehicle Care 10-75

transmission, or Parking onpage 9‑22 with a manualtransmission.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal (B) on thedischarged battery.


10-76 Vehicle Care

6. Connect the other end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery (A).

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery (C).

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal (D) on thedischarged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

B. Dead Battery Positive (+) andNegative (–) Terminals

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the cover over thepositive (+) terminal to theoriginal position.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels offthe ground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑5.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home.The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

When dinghy towing a vehicle withan automatic transmission, thevehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To dinghy tow the vehicle from thefront with all four wheels on theground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the automatic transmissionto P (Park) or a manualtransmission into 1 (First) gearand turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove thefollowing fuse from theinstrument panel fuse block:(DLIS). See Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑36 formore information.

5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

6. Shift the automatic transmissionto N (Neutral) or a manualtransmission to Neutral.

7. Release the parking brake.

Remember to reinstall the DLIS fuseonce the destination has beenreached.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Dolly Towing from the Front

The vehicle can be towed from thefront using a dolly. To tow thevehicle using a dolly, follow thesesteps:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Put an automatic transmissionin P (Park) or a manualtransmission into 1 (First) gear.

4. Set the parking brake andremove the key.

5. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Dolly Towing from the Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear with the front wheelson the ground could causetransmission damage. Do not towthe vehicle from the rear with thefront wheels on the ground.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damagecan be caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Visually checkconstant velocity joints, rubberboots, and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Neverallow cleaners to remain on thesurface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water.


10-84 Vehicle Care

A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water orclub soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed by only clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage causedby air fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong sizeor is not properly installed, itcan interfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended eveningand Saturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can leadto costly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommendedto have your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needsvary. There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑35.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance workcan be dangerous and cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑50.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑20.

Engine Oil Change

When the Code 82 DIC messagedisplays, have the engine oil andfilter changed within the next1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under thebest conditions, the engine oil lifesystem might not indicate the needfor vehicle service for more than a

year. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand the oil life system must bereset. Your trained dealer techniciancan perform this work. If the engineoil life system is reset accidentally,service the vehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the last service.Reset the oil life system when theoil is changed. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑12.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommendedfor the vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑50.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑9 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑20.

. Visually inspect windshieldwiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑80. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑26.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑50.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

. Inspect brake system.



. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑80.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑17.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑80.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑24.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑25.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑25.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑17.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be neededif there is a reduction in airflow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenanceand CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for itproperly may help to avoidfuture costly repairs. To maintainvehicle performance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the servicesand conditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure

to start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if

they squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicianscan inspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’ssystems and components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid incontrol for a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration,bounce/sway while braking,longer stopping distance,or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts forsigns of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend theright tires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.



Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle lookinglike new, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑83 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑80.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, inCanada 88863462).

Windshield WasherAutomotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual Transmission See your dealer.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Manual Transmission Shift LinkageChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96950990 —

Engine Oil Filter 93185674 PF2257G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181

Spark Plugs 55580961 41–120

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 95228809 —

Passenger Side – 38.0 cm (15.0 in) 95228810 —

Rear – 26.5 cm (10.4 in) 95016702 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, in the spare tire wellin the trunk, has the followinginformation:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

1.4L L4 6.5 L 6.9 qt

1.8L L4 6.0 L 6.3 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

1.4L L4 4.0 L 4.2 qt

1.8L L4 4.5 L 4.8 qt

Fuel Tank 46.0 L 12.2 gal

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.4L L4 B Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)

1.8L L4 H Automatic and Manual 0.7 mm (0.028 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine (with AirConditioning)

1.8L L4 Engine (without AirConditioning)


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centreat 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTYuser in the U.S. can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Manage your vehicle (U.S.)at chevrolet.com. Click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login.”

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment

required for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.



Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.



. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.

General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor maygive permission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment,up to $100, after sending theoriginal receipt to RoadsideAssistance. Mechanical failuresmay be covered, however anycost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in thework day as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by

original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.



Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which the vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice to

ensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.



As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage.There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑5.



Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑24.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towedthere. Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby the GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners andintended to provide basicoperational information about thevehicle. The Owner Manual includesthe Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash-like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is available

at www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. SeeOnStar Overview on page 14‑1.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.



Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinationscan also be forwarded to thevehicle from Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps and MapQuest.com totheir Turn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav,Destination Download, andcoverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can alsobe controlled from a cell phonethrough the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app. See www.onstar.comfor coverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device,an OnStar RemoteLink mobile appcan be downloaded. The vehiclecan be remote started, if equipped,or the doors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipmentor software is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service maynot work. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. The

available dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricingand sign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be promptedto change the PIN the first timewhen speaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.


OnStar 14-7

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑40. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-21AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

ArmrestFront Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

AudioBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-13Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2


i-2 INDEX

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-25Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Central Locking System . . . . . . . . 2-7


INDEX i-3

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-39

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 3-48Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Code Set Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16


i-4 INDEX

Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingBetter Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Engine (cont'd)Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-23Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3, 9-17

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22


INDEX i-5

Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Economy, Driving for Better . . . . 9-2Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-36Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Requirements, California . . . . .9-36

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36

GaugesFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-22

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13


i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

IndicatorCode Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Owner Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-38LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6LightingIllumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-19

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-15Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) Warning . . .5-17

StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Load Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14MessagesVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

MirrorsConvex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-32Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Owner Manual Indicator . . . . . . . 5-15


i-8 INDEX

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-22Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-19, 7-21, 7-25

PowerMirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Power (cont'd)Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-31


INDEX i-9

Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-17

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45, 3-48

SecurityOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21


i-10 INDEX

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speed Sensitive PowerSteering (SSPS) WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-3, 9-17Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

StorageLoad Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont'd)Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

TowingGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . .9-39Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-77Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-29Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Vehicle (cont'd)Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-66

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20


i-12 INDEX

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-38Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Documents

2012 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M - General Motors · PDF file2012 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M In Brief ... Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual - 2012 - CRC - 11/9/11 Black plate (2,1)